دليل مرجعي

ManualsBrandsNikon ManualsDigital CameraCOOLPIX S02

ﻲﻌﺟﺮﻣ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺭ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ

ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ ﻝﻭﺪﺟ

ﻚﺘﻣﻼﺳ ﻞﺟﺃ ﻦﻣ

ﺪﻌﺘﺳﺍ

ﺭﻮﺼﻳ

ﺽﺮﻋ

ﻞﺻﻭ

ﺩﺍﺪﻋﻹﺍ ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻗ

ﺔﻴﻨﻓ ﺕﺎﻈﺣﻼﻣ

ﺱﺮﻬﻓ

Summary of content (104 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪Ar‬‬
PAGE 2
‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ COOLPIX S02‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (iv–iii A‬ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ ‪iii ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪v ...............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‪1....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪5.......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪6...............................................
PAGE 4
‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪52 ..............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪52 ................................................................. ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :ViewNX 2‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪53 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪54 ..................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪57 ..................................................................... (DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪59 .....
PAGE 5
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺀﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺄﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﺢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎﺀ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺬﻭﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺳﺎﺀﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪ :‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﻕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺤﺮﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻓﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﹰ ﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ؛ ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻛﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺜﺒ ﹰﺘﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.
PAGE 12
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2.1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻃﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ (q‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪.(w‬‬ ‫‪ 2.2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ )‪.(e‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﻂﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 13
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3.1‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3.2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3.3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ I‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪﻱ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪ 3.4‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪7 A......
PAGE 15
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪2 .............................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ‪9 ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) c‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪35 ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪40 ،39 ،9...................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1 ...........
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺃﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻓﻮﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ‪ TP-1‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻏﺸﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(35 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪.(8 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )‪.(61 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪.(15 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ( ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪12 A ......................
PAGE 18
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ "ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻓﻚ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ" ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪10 A .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪9 A .........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪19 A ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪20 A .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪22 A .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪23 A ........
PAGE 19
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻀﺊ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺀ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪56‬‬ ‫‪3 4‬‬ ‫‪1 2‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪12 13‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪22 .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ‪20 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪14 ............
PAGE 21
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ؛ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.
PAGE 22
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19 A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪20 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ T‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )‪ ،(22 A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ d‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪G‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،G‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺯﺭ ‪.W‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪19 A ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪23 A ........‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪25 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪27 A ...................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪28 A ...................................AF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪29 A ......‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪18 A ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪30 A ......
PAGE 26
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪15 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ‪18 ،15 .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ "ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ"‪61 ،11 .......................................................‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪66 .......................................................
PAGE 27
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19 A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪28 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻫﻮ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻞﺀ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪ (HDR‬ﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ )‪ .(22 A‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﹰﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﹰ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ‪ HDR‬ﺑﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎﺀﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﺀﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪ V‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ U‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﹰﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ V‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﹰ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪A :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ .(10 A‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪I‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫) ‪ ( X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪ (19 A‬ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪ A) C‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ C‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ p‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪D :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.AF‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ AF X‬ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪D :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ *‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪15 A ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪30 A ...... HS‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪32 A ................‬‬ ‫* ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻐﺔ(‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪:HS‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪ ،(29 A‬ﺣﺪﺩ ×‪ HS 720/2‬ﺃﻭ ×‪.HS 1080/0.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(31 A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫×‪ HS 720/2‬ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ×‪HS 1080/0.5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ×‪ HS 720/2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺙ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ×‪HS 1080/0.
PAGE 42
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪D :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪HS‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ HS‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪.HS‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪29 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪30 A ...... HS‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ HS‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ A :‬ﺃﻭ ‪D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (12 A‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(17 A‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .c‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ c‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪36 A ............................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪39 A ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪40 A .......................
PAGE 46
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ c‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 35‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺜﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .R‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ B/A‬ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﻟﻺﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .
PAGE 47
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪64 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪43 ،41 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ a‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪57 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ e‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪11 ...........................................
PAGE 48
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ W‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .C‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪C‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪51 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺿﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪42 A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ (g) i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﻫﺎ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ؛ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C ،B ،A‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ .D‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻘﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪(f) h‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .B‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ (g) i‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ )‪ (45 ،43 A‬ﻭﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ D‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.D‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪42 A ................................
PAGE 52
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪y‬؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪41 A ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪43 A ....................
PAGE 53
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎﺀ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.h‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ ‪41 A ...‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻘﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.C‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 30‬ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ؛ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 9000‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺄﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﻗ ﹰﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪B/A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪* .‬‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎﺀ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻹﻧﻬﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻹﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻨﻘﺤﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.J‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺸﻔﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ E‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻭﺃﻓﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.E‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪51 A .......................‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ‪ .
PAGE 60
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻼ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪49 A .....................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﹰﺍ ﺟ ﹰﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ .
PAGE 62
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ViewNX 2‬ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻤﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺷﻐﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪:‬‬ ‫‪http://nikonimglib.com/nvnx/‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ :ViewNX 2‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )‪.(71 A‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪) Start Transfer‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.ViewNX 2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪57 A .........................‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋ ﹼﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.F‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻌﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ 99‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ؛ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪.y‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺮﹰﺍ‪ .‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ .
PAGE 66
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ :DPOF‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ))‪DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪B :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺀ "ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻭﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ‪Digital Print Order) DPOF‬‬ ‫‪.(Format‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 68
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻄﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ I‬ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ EG-CP16‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺷﻐﱢﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ c‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،A/V‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫)‪.(70 A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .
PAGE 71
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪W‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ B‬ﺃﻭ ‪ C‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪HOME‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪62 A‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺀ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪63 A‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪HOME‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) HOME‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.HOME‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .
PAGE 73
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﺣﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺣﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ B‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ‪ .
PAGE 75
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ o‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫)ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(o‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻭ ‪ D‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪I‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻭﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ w‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(65 A) o‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 77
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ )‪.(52 A‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻧﻌﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ )‪ (41 A‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪Language/‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.Language/‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 80
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫‪NTSC‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.NTSC‬‬ ‫‪PAL‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )‪.(53 A‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪.J‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺪﺓ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪Firmware‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ‪W :‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪Firmware‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ‪ J‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪DSCN0001.JPG‬‬ ‫‪ JPG‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ MOV‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪76 A....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪79 A................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ ‪80 A...........‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ‪85 A..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪87 A.............................
PAGE 86
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻼﻣﺘﻚ" )‪ (iv–iii A‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻪ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺀ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺷﻤﻮﺍﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻢ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪-‬ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ؛ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪ .(2 A‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪° 5‬ﻡ ﻭ‪° 35‬ﻡ؛ ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ‪° 0‬ﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ‪° 60‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺟﺰﺋ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺰﺟﺎﺝ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﻭﺣﺔ )ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺦ ﺩﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺀ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻪ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺼﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ﻭﺍﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻤﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺠﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺪﺑﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ )‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻻ ﹰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪77‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪11 ،2‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪59 ،54 ،53‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 93
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻐﻄﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪67‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲﺀ ﺿﻮﺀ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻄﺨﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻧﻈﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ "ﺿﻮﺿﺎﺀ" ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪47‬؛ ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪70‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪ Nikon Transfer 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺣﻤﺎﺀ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫—‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪،49 ،24‬‬ ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺪﺑﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ )‪ .(5 A‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫❚❚ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪COOLPIX S02‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪ 13.2‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪-1/3.1‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪CMOS‬؛ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ 14.17 :‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،NIKKOR‬ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ‪×3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 12.3–4.1‬ﻣﻢ )ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 90-30‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ ]‪([135‬‬ ‫‪f/3.3–5.
PAGE 98
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫)ﺧﺮﺝ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪ISO 125–1600‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻻﺕ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻔﻮﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،(×2‬ﺑﻘﻌﻲ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ ×2‬ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪ EV ±2‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪(EV 1/3‬‬ ‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪CMOS‬‬ ‫‪ 1–1/2000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﺎﻳﺪ )‪ (ND‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧ ﹰﻴﺎ‬ ‫)‪(AV –2‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ
PAGE 99
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﻌﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻤﻖ(‬ ‫‪ 100‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ﹰﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪° 0‬ﻡ–‪° 40‬ﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ 85%‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻜﺜﻴﻒ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﺔ ‪° 23 ±3‬ﻡ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(CIPA‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫❚❚ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪AVC Patent Portfolio License‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪ AVC Patent Portfolio License‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ )‪ (i‬ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻓﻘﹰﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪") AVC‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻃﺎ‬ ‫‪ ("AVC‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ )‪ (ii‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ AVC‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻣﻴﺰﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﻳﻤﺎﺭﺱ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼ ﹰﻴﺎ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺮﺧﹼ ﺺ ﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ .AVC‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .MPEG LA، L.L.
PAGE 101
‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪62 ،7 ...................................................(HOME) W‬‬ ‫‪) A‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪8 ..............................................‬‬ ‫‪) B‬ﻋﺮﺽ( ‪35 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫‪) D‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪36 ،15 ...................................................‬‬ ‫‪) z‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪61 ............................................................‬‬ ‫‪) h‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻼﺕ( ‪43 ......................................
PAGE 102
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪23 ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍﺀ‪22 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪59 ................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪68 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪29 ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪24 ......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ‪49 ..............................................................
PAGE 103
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪28 ...............................................................AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪24 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪20 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪62 .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻐﺮ‪9 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ‪8 .................................................................
PAGE 104
‫ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻴﺎ ﹰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﹰ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻗﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺎﺕ( ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺼﺮﻳﺢ ﺧﻄﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﺑﻮﺭﻳﺸﻦ‪.